ENGLISH GC900 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ELECTRONICS INC. P/N : MMBB0341134 (1.0) H GC900 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ENGLISH ﻋﺮﺑﻲ GC900 User Guide P/N : MMBB0341134 (1.
Bluetooth QD ID B015267
Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact GC900 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology.
Set up 01 Your home screen 02 The basics 03 Get creative 04 Get organised 05 The web 06 Settings 07 Accessories 08
Contents Set up Getting to know your phone ............... 8 Open view .................................................10 Installing the SIM and battery ...........11 Charging your phone............................13 Memory card ............................................14 Menu map .................................................16 Your home screen Touch screen tips .....................................17 Customising the home screen............18 Quick keys .............................................
Get creative Camera .......................................................45 Taking a quick photo .............................45 Once you’ve taken the photo .............46 Getting to know the viewfinder.........47 Using the flash ..........................................48 Adjusting the exposure.........................48 Taking a continuous shot .....................49 Using the advanced settings...............49 Changing the image size ......................52 Choosing a colour effect.................
Contents Sounds ........................................................75 Using a sound ...........................................75 Videos .........................................................75 Sending a video clip ...............................76 Games and Applications ......................76 Playing a game .........................................76 Using the options menu ......................76 Installing a Java game and application .............................................................
Using iSync ................................................92 DivX Converter .........................................93 The web Browser .......................................................94 Accessing the web ..................................94 Adding and accessing bookmarks ....94 Using the RSS reader ..............................95 Accessing a saved page ........................95 Viewing your browser history .............95 Changing web browser settings ........96 Using your phone as a modem ....
Getting to know your phone Power key Turns the phone on/off. Earpiece Proximity Sensor WARNING: Moisture on the proximity sensor may cause it to malfunction. Please wipe any moisture off the sensor surface. Inner camera End key • Press once to return to the home screen. WARNING: Putting a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage its LCD and touch screen functionality. Do not cover the protection film on proximity sensor of LCD. It can be caused the malfunction of sensor.
Memory card socket Multi-tasking key Camera key • Go to the camera menu directly by pressing and holding the key. Charger, Data cable (USB cable) TIP: Before connecting the USB cable, wait until the phone has powered up and has registered on the network. Volume keys • When the screen is idle: key tone volume. • During a call: earpiece volume. • When playing a track: controls volume continuously.
Open view Battery cover SIM card socket Flash light Battery Camera lens TIP! You can turn the flash on by holding down the volume up key when the keypad is locked. Press the volume up key again to turn the flash off. This function is only available when the keypad is locked.
Installing the SIM and battery 1 Remove the battery cover Slide down the battery cover. 3 Install the SIM card Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, gently pull it outwards. 2 Remove the battery Pull out the battery. WARNING: Do not remove the battery when the phone is switched on, as this may damage the phone.
Installing the SIM and battery 4 Install the battery Insert the top of the battery into the top edge of the battery compartment first. Ensure that the battery contacts align with the phone’s terminals. Press the bottom of the battery down until it clips into place.
Charging your phone 1 Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone for the first time. 2 With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the travel adapter into the socket on the side of the phone until it clicks into place. 3 Connect the other end of the travel adapter to the main socket. Use only the charger included in the box. 4 The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete.
Memory card Installing a memory card You can expand the available memory space on your phone by using a memory card. NOTE: A memory card is an optional accessory. Slide the memory card into the slot at the top, until it clicks into place. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards. WARNING: Slide into the memory card to the slot, otherwise, the card can be damaged.
Formatting the memory card Transferring your contacts Your memory card may already be formatted. If it isn’t, you will need to format it before you can start to use it. NOTE: All files get deleted while formatting. 1 From the home screen select and choose Phone settings from the Settings tab. 2 Scroll and touch Memory info. then scroll and select External memory. 3 Touch Format and then confirm your choice. 4 Enter the password, if one has been set. The card will then be formatted and ready to use.
Menu map Touch in the home screen to open a Top menu. From here you can access further menus by scrolling through the icons: Communication, Multimedia, Utilities and Settings.
Your home screen From this screen you can access menu options, make a call, view the status of your phone and much more. • Whenever your GC900 is not in use, it will return to the lock screen. Touch screen tips The home screen is also a great place to get used to using the touch screen. To select an item, touch the centre of the icon. • Do not press too hard; the touchscreen is sensitive enough to pick up on a light, firm touch. • Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you require.
Your home screen Customising the home screen 1 Shortcut home screen 2 Widget home screen (active) • Get in touch with your GC900 The User Interface is based on four types of Homescreens. To swap between the home screens just wipe quickly over display from left to right or from right to left. • Home screen customisation - For each type of home screen you are able to add and remove objects by pressing & holding your finger on the screen, or if already added touching and holding one of the objects.
1 Touch Edit favourites. 2 Select Music or Gallery menu if you want to add music or image to homescreen. 3 Select the image or music you want to be in each menu. 4 You can see the image or listen to the sound you selected in homescreen. Quick keys The quick keys on your home screen provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad, which lets you make a call. Enter the number using the normal key pad and touch Voice call.
Your home screen Touch screen The controls on the GC900 touch screen change dynamically, depending on the task you are carrying out. Opening Applications To open any Application, simply touch its icon. 20 LG GC900 | User Guide Scrolling Drag from side to side to scroll. On some screens, such as web pages, you can also scroll up or down.
Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, web pages, emails, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or slide them apart.
Your home screen Viewing the status bar The status bar uses different icons to show conditions such as signal strength, new messages and battery life as well as whether Bluetooth or data connections is active. Below is a table which explains the meaning of icons you’re likely to see in the status bar. Icon Description No Service Icon Description Bluetooth Transfer Bluetooth Visibility Bluetooth Music Downloading Downloading complete. Downloading cancelled.
Icon Description Music playing Icon Description Projector/TV out Email being sent Email receiving MMS MMS sending MMS receiving SMS sending New voicemail New message Message sending has failed New email Push message Flight mode Normal Outdoor Silent - Customised ringtones 1-10 External memory Battery status 23
Your home screen Using the Multi - tasking function Press the multitasking hard key for two seconds to open the Multitasking menu. From here you can view some applications that are running and access them with one touch. Multitasking Contacts Browser Messaging Games & Apps Email Music FM radio Organiser Memo End all TIP! Press the multitasking hard key shortly to enter cube box to customise the home screen.
Calls TIP! Press the power key to lock the touchscreen to prevent calls being made by mistake. Making a call or a video call 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Type in the number on the keypad. To delete a digit, press the clear key. 3 Touch the Voice call to make the call. 4 To end the call, touch the key. Calling your contacts 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list or enter the first letter(s) of the contact you want to call by touching .
Calls In-call options Hold - Touch to put a call on hold. Mute - Touch to turn the microphone off so the person you are talking to cannot hear you. Speaker - Touch to turn the speaker phone on. Options - Choose from a list of further in-call options, including creating new memo and going to messages, so you can check your messages and add contacts during a call. You can also end the call from here by touching End call. - Touch to open a numerical keypad for typing numbers, e.g.
Adjusting call volume To adjust the volume during a call, use the up and down button on the right side of the phone. Speed dialling You can assign a frequently-called contact to a speed dial number. 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts. 2 Touch and select Speed dials. 3 Your voicemail is already set to speed dial 1. You cannot change this. Touch any other number to assign it to a speed dial contact. 4 Your contacts list will open.
Calls Turning off DTMF DTMF lets you use numerical commands to navigate within automated calls. DTMF default is set to on. To turn it off during a call (to make and a note of a number) touch select Disable DTMF. Viewing your call logs From the home screen, touch , then touch Recent history in the Communication tab. Choose from the following: All history - View a complete list of all dialled, received and missed calls, voice calls only, video calls and messages.
Using call divert Using call barring and choose Call 1 Touch settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Call divert and select Voice calls and/or Video calls. 3 Choose whether to divert all call, when the line is busy, when there is no answer or when you cannot be contacted. 4 Touch Activate to activate. 5 Enter the number to divert to. NOTE: Diverting calls will incur charges. Please contact your network operator for details. 1 Touch and choose Call settings in the Settings tab.
Calls TIP! Select Fixed dial number to turn on and compile a list of numbers which can be called from your phone. You’ll need your PIN2 code, which is available from your operator. Only numbers within the fixed dial list can be called from your phone. Changing the common call setting 1 Touch and choose Call settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Common settings. This lets you change the following settings: Call reject - Slide the switch left for ON.
Changing your video call settings 1 From the home screen, touch and scroll to Call settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Video call settings and select the settings for your video calls. Decide whether to use still image, then select ON/OFF to switch on the mirror to see yourself on screen when making a video call.
Contacts Searching for a contact Adding a new contact There are two ways to search for a contact: From the home screen 1 From the home screen, touch to open your Contacts. Touch and enter the contact name using the key pad. 2 Touch Video call or Voice call or the Voice call to place the call. 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch then select New contact button. 2 Choose whether to save the contact to Handset or USIM. 3 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, touch Add picture.
7 Assign the contact to one or more groups, choosing between No group, Family, Friends, Colleagues, School or VIP. 8 You can also add a Ringtone, Homepage, Home address, Company name, Job title, Company address, Birthday, Anniversary and a Memo. to save the contact. 9 Touch TIP! You can create customised groups for your contacts. See Creating a group. Creating a group 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch Contacts in the Communication tab.
Contacts Changing your contact settings You can adapt your contact settings to suit your own preferences. 1 Touch Contacts on the Communication tab, select and scroll to Contact settings. 2 From here, you can adjust the following settings: Display name - Choose whether to display the first or last name of a contact first. Copy all - Copy your contacts from your SIM to your handset, or vice versa. You can do this one contact at a time, or all at once.
Viewing information 1 Touch Contacts from the Communication tab select and touch Information. 2 From here you can view Service dial numbers, Own numbers, Memory info. (memory space remaining) and My business card. TIP! To add your own business card, select My business card and enter your details as you would for any contact. Touch Save icon to finish.
Messaging Messaging Your GC900 combines SMS, MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. There are two ways of entering the messaging centre: 1 From the home screen, touch , then scroll to Messaging or on the Communication tab. TIP! You will be charged for text message for every person you send the message to. 4 Touch Insert to add a text template, multimedia templates, emoticon, name & number, new slide, subject or signature. Sending a message 1 Touch then Write message to open a blank message.
Entering text T9 predictive Touch to turn on T9 predictive texting. Touch to change the writing language. Tap to change between the number, symbol and text keypads. In T9 mode, you will see . T9 mode uses a built-in dictionary to recognise your words based on the key sequences you touch. Simply touch the number key associated with the letter you want to enter, and the dictionary will predict the word you want to use. For example, press 8, 3, 5, 3, 7, 4, 6, 6 and 3 to write ‘telephone’.
Messaging Setting up your email You can keep in touch on the move by using your GC900 to send emails. It’s quick and simple to set up a POP3 or IMAP4 email account. 1 Touch from the home screen, and scroll to Email on the Communication tab. 2 Touch Write email. If the email account is not set up, start the email set up wizard. TIP! If an email account is already set up, the wizard is not activated automatically.
Save sent mail into - Select where to save sent emails (for IMAP4 mailboxes). For POP3 mailboxes, sent mails are always saved to the handset. Download option - Choose how you want to download emails. Choose between Header only or All including attachment for POP3 and header only, header + body, or all for IMAP4. Access point - Choose your Internet access point. Advanced settings - Choose whether to use the advanced settings.
Messaging Changing your email settings You can change your email settings based on your own preferences. 1 Touch from the home screen, then scroll to Messages settings on the Settings tab. 2 Select Email. 3 You can alter the following settings: Email accounts - Manage your email accounts. Allow reply email - Choose whether to allow read confirmation messages to be sent. Request reply email - Choose whether to request read confirmation messages.
Message folders You will recognise the folder structure in your GC900, and it is fairly self-explanatory. NOTE: E-mail account box and Message box are arranged respectively. Inbox - All messages you receive are stored in your inbox. From here you can view and delete them, among other functions. Outbox - This is a temporary storage folder while messages are being sent. Sent - Messages you sent are stored in this folder.
Messaging Using emoticons Liven up your messages using emoticons. There are some commonly used emoticons already on your phone. 1 When writing a new message, you can enter Emoticons from Insert in the options menu. 2 You can add a new emoticon by touching New emoticon. Changing your text message settings Your GC900 message settings are pre-defined, so you can send messages immediately. These settings can be changed based on your preferences.
Changing your multimedia message settings Your GC900 message settings are pre-defined, so you can send messages immediately. These settings can be changed based on your preferences. In Setting tap select Message settings and Multimedia message. You can make changes to the following: Retrieval mode - Select Home network or Roaming network. If you then select Manual, you will only receive notifications about MMS messages. You can then decide whether or not to download them in full.
Messaging Changing your other settings Scroll to Message settings on the Settings tab then: Voicemail - Touch New profile or to add a new Voicemail service. Contact your network operator for more information about the service they provide. Service message - Choose whether to receive or block service messages. You can also set message security levels by creating trusted and untrusted sender lists. Info. service - Choose your reception status, language and other settings.
Camera Taking a quick photo 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. 2 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject you want to take a picture of. 3 Press the capture button lightly and a focus box will appear in the centre of the viewfinder screen. 4 Position the phone so you can see the photo subject in the focus box. 5 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject. 6 Press the capture button and hold it down.
Camera Once you’ve taken the photo Your captured photo will appear on the screen. The image name is shown with four icons on the righthand side. Send Use Rename Edit Touch to send the photo as a Message, Email, Bluetooth or Blogger. Send NOTE: Additional cost may occur when MMS are downloaded when roaming. Use Touch to use the image as homescreen, Lock screen,contact ,Start-up/Shut down and Outgoing/ Incoming call image. 46 LG GC900 | User Guide Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected picture.
Getting to know the viewfinder Back - Touch here to return to the menu map. Switch mode - Change the mode between camera and video camera. Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. Macro - Switch this on to take close up shots. Flash status - Set flash light mode to automatic, Red-eye reduction,on or off. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on next page. Scene mode - Set the camera to adjust to the environment.
Camera Using the flash The default flash setting is auto, but there are other options. 1 Select from the left side of the viewfinder to enter the flash sub-menu. 2 There are four flash options: Auto - Your camera will assess the light available for a good picture and use the flash as necessary. Red-eye reduction - The camera will flash twice in order to remove red eye. Always on - The camera will always flash. Always off - The camera will never flash. This is useful if you want to save battery power.
Taking a continuous shot 1 From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options and select Continuous shot in shot mode menu. 2 Position the subject in the viewfinder and press the capture button as if taking a normal photo. 3 The camera will take shots in quick succession. Using the advanced settings From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options. You can change the camera setting by scrolling the wheel. After selecting the option, touch the OK button.
Camera Shot mode - Choose from the options: Normal - This is default shot type, the photo will be taken in normal way. Continuous shot - This enables you to take six shots automatically in very quick succession. Smile shot - This shot type is great for taking a photo of people. Focus on the subject and press then the photo will be taken automatically when it smile. Beauty shot - This enables you to take a photo of person’s face clearly and brightly. Especially useful when you are close up.
Memory in use - Choose whether to save your photos to the Handset memory or the External memory. Preview style - Choose the preview type whether you want to see the image as full image or full screen. Hide icons - Choose the camera settings icons to be hidden manually or automatically. TIP! When you exit the camera all settings will return to their defaults, except image size and image quality. Any non-default settings will need to be reset, such as colour tone. Check these before you take your next photo.
Camera Changing the image size Choosing a colour effect The more pixels, the larger the file, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more pictures on your phone, you can change the resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Colour effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are four colour tone options: Sepia, Mono, Negative, and Emboss.
Using the inner camera Your LG GC900 has an inner 640x480 camera for both video calls and taking photos. 1 To switch to the inner camera then select Swap touch camera- Secondary from the Preview menu. 2 After a few seconds you’ll see yourself in the viewfinder. To capture the image, press the side button as normal. 3 After you’ve taken the photo you’ll be offered all the same options as for an image taken with the main camera. 4 To return to the main camera and then select Main touch from the Preview menu.
Video camera Shooting a quick video 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. 2 Then, touch . Or, you can enter this menu directly by touching Video camera. 3 The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen. 4 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video. 5 Press the capture button once to start recording. 6 Rec will appear at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video.
After shooting a video A still image representing your video will appear on the screen. The name of the video will be shown on the bottom of the screen, along with four icons on the right-hand side. Play TIP! The great editing software on your LG GC900 is compatible with all video types except 720X480 (D1). Don‘t record in this format if you plan to edit your video. Touch to return to the previous menu. Send Use Rename Play Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected picture.
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Back - Touch here to return to the home screen. Start recording Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on next page for details. Recording speed Flash status - Set or turn off the flash. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on next page. Scene mode - Choose from Auto or Night. TIP! You can close all shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen.
Adjusting the exposure The exposure defines the difference between light and dark areas in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the exposure indicator for along the bar, towards a lower exposure and fuzzier for a higher image, or towards contrast and sharper image. Using the advanced settings Using the viewfinder, touch Settings to open all the advanced settings options.
Video camera Video quality - Choose between Super fine, Fine and Normal. The finer the quality, the sharper the video will be. The file size will increase as a result, meaning you’ll be able to store fewer videos in the phone’s memory. Duration - Set a duration limit for your video. Choose between Normal and MMS to limit the maximum size to send as an MMS. TIP! If you choose MMS duration, choosing a lower image quality will enable you to shoot a longer video.
Changing the video image size The more pixels, the larger the file size, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more videos on your phone, you can change the video resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Video size from the Preview menu. 3 Select a pixel value from the four options: 720X480 (D1) - The highest quality, widescreen option. 640x480 (VGA) - Standard sized VGA.
Video camera Choosing a colour tone Using the inner video camera 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Colour effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are five colour tone options, Off, Sepia, Mono, Negative or Emboss. 4 Touch the colour tone you want to use. Your LG GC900 has an inner 320x240 camera for both video calls and recording videos. 1 To switch to the inner camera, then select Swap touch camera then Secondary from the Preview menu.
TIP! You can still alter the image size, colour effect, white balance and quality by touching Settings in the same way as when using the main camera. Watching your saved videos 1 In the viewfinder, touch . 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch a video once to bring it to the front of the gallery. It start to play by touching play icon.
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos and videos Using zoom when viewing a video or photo 1 Touch on the camera preview screen. 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch the video or photo to open it fully. When viewing photos or videos, you can zoom in and out by pinching your fingers together or spreading them apart.
Setting a photo as wallpaper Editing your photos 1 Touch the photo you want to set as wallpaper to open it. 2 Touch the screen to open the options menu. 3 Touch Use as . 4 The screen will switch to portrait mode. You can zoom in and out the image. You can do lots of great things to your photos to change them, add to them or liven them up. 1 Open the photo you want to edit and touch Edit to show the options. 2 Touch the icons to alter your photo: Crop your photo.
Your photos and videos Decorate your photo with stamps. Choose from the different stamps and touch your photo where you want to place them. Erase the editing you have done to the picture. You can choose the size of eraser you use. Filter Touch to apply the effect options to a photo. Adjust ment This helps to adjust a picture taken using automatic colour, brightness etc. Save Touch to return to the gallery. Save Save the changes you made to the photos.
Adding text to a photo Adding an effect to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch . 2 Select Text to add unframed text or choose one of the speech bubble shapes. 3 Enter your text using the keypad and touch Save. 4 Move the text by touching it and sliding it to where you want it. 1 From the editing screen, touch Filter . 2 You can apply any of the various options to the photo 3 To undo an effect simply touch Undo .
Your photos and videos Adding a colour accent to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch Image . 2 Choose Colour Accent. 3 Select part of the photo. A traced line will appear around everything in that area which is the same or a similar colour, for example, a person’s hair or jumper. 4 Alter the intensity of the accenting by touching Intensity and touch ‘+’ or ‘-’ button. 5 Touch OK. 6 All colour will be removed from the photo, apart from the in the section marked for colour accenting.
Editing your videos The video editing features are available for MPEG4 types except 720x480 (D1) resolution. Don‘t record in these formats if you plan to edit your video. Save Undo Trim Preview Trimming the length of the video Merging two videos 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Trim/ Multi trim. 3 Touch and set the new start and end points using Trim . 4 Touch Preview to confirm you are satisfied with the new cut.
Your photos and videos Merging a photo with a video Movie editor > Merge Save Undo File name 1 Duration : 00:00:40 File name 4 Duration : 00:00:40 Total : 00:01:20 Effect Preview 6 Press Save then New file to save the new merged video. Replace the existing file or save as a new file. 7 Repeat these steps to merge more videos. 68 LG GC900 | User Guide 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Image merge. 3 The My images folder will open.
Adding text to a video 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and select Text overlay. 3 Touch and pause playback for setting the start point for text appearance. 4 Touch Start and choose the text styles. Enter your text using the keypad and select OK. 5 Touch the area of the screen you want the text to appear and touch OK. Save Undo Show text Preview 6 Touch Save. Replace the existing file or save as a new file. 7 Repeat these steps to add more text.
Your photos and videos 6 Touch OK and then press End when the photo overlay shall be stopped. 7 Touch Save. Replace the existing file or save as a new file. 8 Repeat these steps to add more photos. 5 If the audio is shorter than the video, choose whether to play it Once or to Repeat it. 6 Replace the existing file or save as a new file. Adding a soundtrack to your video 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Live dubbing.
Changing the video speed Creating a movie 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Time scaling. 3 Select one of the options. This can vary depending on the frame rate. 4 Replace the original file or save as a new file. 1 Touch then select Movie maker from Multimedia tab. Adding a dimming effect 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch Edit 2 Select and choose Dimming Effect. 3 Your video will now fade in at the start and fade out at the end.
Multimedia You can store multimedia files in your phone’s memory so you have easy access to all your pictures, sounds, videos and games. You can also save your files to a memory card. Using a memory card allows you to free up space in your phone’s memory. To access the Multimedia menu, select My stuff from touch Multimedia tab. You can open a list of the folders that store all your multimedia files. TIP! To delete any files in then Delete.
Using an image You can choose images to use as wallpapers and screensavers, or even to identify a caller. then select My stuff 1 Touch from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Select an image and touch . 4 Touch Use as and choose between: Homescreens - Set an image as a homescreen. Lock screen - Set a wallpaper for the key lock screen. Contacts - Allocate an image to a person in your contacts list, so the picture is displayed when they call you.
Multimedia Moving or copying an image Geo-tagging An image can be moved or copied between the phone memory and the memory card. You may want to do this to clear some space in one of the memories, or to safeguard your images against loss. 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Touch . 4 Select Move or Copy. Turn on the camera and enjoy the capabilities of your phone’s locationbased services. Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location.
Sounds Videos The My sounds folder contains Downloaded sounds, Default sounds and Voice recordings. From here you can manage or send sounds or set them as ringtones. The My videos folder shows a list of videos you have downloaded or recorded on your phone. Watching a video 1 Touch then select My stuff on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My videos. 3 Select a video to play. Using a sound 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My sounds. 3 Select Default sounds or Voice recordings.
Multimedia Sending a video clip Playing a game 1 Select a video and touch . 2 Touch Send and choose between Message, Email, Bluetooth and Youtube. 3 If you choose Message or Email, your video clip will be attached to the message, which you can write and send as normal. If you choose Bluetooth, your phone will search for a device to send the video to. 1 Touch then select Games & Apps on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Games or Applications menu. 3 Touch Launch button to launch a game or an application.
Installing a Java game and application 1 Touch then select My stuff on the Multimedia tab. 2 If you insert new memory card, touch External Memory menu. 3 Select the file(*.jad or *.jar) you want to install and touch Install. Viewing an SWF/ SVG file 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Flash contents. 3 Select the file you want to view. Documents This is possible with your Excel, PowerPoint, Word, Text and pdf files.
Multimedia Transferring a file to your phone Bluetooth is probably the easiest way of transferring a file from your computer to your phone. You can also use LG PC Suite via your sync cable. To transfer files (e.g. music) using Bluetooth: 1 Make sure your phone and computer have Bluetooth switched on and are within range of each other 2 Use your computer to send the file via Bluetooth. 3 When the file is sent, accept it on your phone by touching Yes.
Music Your LG GC900 has a built-in music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks. To access the music then select Music player, touch from Multimedia Tab. From here, you can access a number of folders: All tracks - Contains all the songs such as MP3, WMA, WAV, and AAC format types you have on your phone. Favorites - Contains the songs you have saved as favourites. Artists - Browse your music collection by artist. Albums - Browse your music collection by album.
Multimedia Playing a song Creating a playlist 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch All tracks. 3 Select the song you want to play . then touch 4 Touch to pause the song. to skip to the next 5 Touch song. to go back to the 6 Touch previous song. 7 Touch to return to the Music menu. You can create your own playlists by choosing a selection of songs from the All tracks folder. 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch the option icon.
Deleting a playlist 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Playlist. option icon. 3 Touch the 4 Touch Remove or Remove all to delete all of the playlists. Using the radio Your LG GC900 has an built-in FM radio feature so you can tune into your favourite stations and listen on the move. NOTE: You will need to attach your headphones to listen to the radio. Insert them into the headphone socket.
Multimedia 3 Touch Auto scan then Yes. The stations found will be allocated to channel numbers in your phone by selecting Set, Skip and Stop. NOTE: You can also manually tune to a station by using the wheel displayed next to the radio frequency. Resetting channels then select FM radio 1 Touch from Multimedia tab. . 2 Touch 3 Touch Reset Channel to reset the current channel or touch Reset all to reset all of the channels. If you reset all of the channels, each channel will return to the starting 87.
Organiser Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. 2 Select the date to which you want to add an event. then New schedule. 3 Touch 4 Touch Category then choose between Appointment, Anniversary or Birthday. Check the date and enter the time you want your event to begin. 5 For appointments and anniversaries, you can enter the time and date the event finishes in the lower time and date boxes.
Organiser Adding an item to your To Do list 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. select New task and 2 Select touch Note. 3 Set the date for the task, add notes, then select its priority level: High, Medium or Low. . 4 Save the task by selecting TIP! You can back up and synchronise your calendar with your computer(PC Sync).
Setting your alarm Adding a memo 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Alarms on the Utilities tab. 2 If you want add a new alarm, touch New alarm. If you want to set the alarm to sound again within one hour, touch Quick alarm. 3 Set the time you would like the alarm to sound. 4 Choose whether you want the alarm to repeat, set the repeat and type. The icons indicate the weekday you select. 5 Select Sound/ Vibration to select the type of alarm you want.
Organiser Voice recorder Sending the voice recording Use your voice recorder to record voice memos or other audio files. 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip by touching Send. 2 Choose Message, Email or Bluetooth. If you choose Message or Email, the recording will be added to the message which you can write and send it as normal. If you choose Bluetooth, your phone will search for a device to send the voice recording to. Recording a sound or voice 1 Touch .
Using your calculator 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Calculator on the Utilities tab. 2 Touch the number keys to enter numbers. 3 For simple calculations, touch the function you require (+, –, x or ÷), followed by =. 4 For more complex calculations, and choose between touch sin, cos, tan, deg, log, etc.. Converting a unit 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Tools on the Utilities tab. 2 Select Unit converter.
Organiser Adding a city to your world clock 1 From the home screen, select and scroll to World clock in the Utilities tab. icon, followed by 2 Touch the Add city. Start typing the name of the city you require, and it will be displayed on the screen. 3 Touch the city to select it. This will add it to your World time list.
PC Suite You can synchronise your PC with your phone. This will ensure all your important details and dates match, and also act as a back up to help your mind at ease. TIP! To do this, you will need to install the PC Suite application provided on the CD-ROM or available as a download from the website. (From www. lgmobile.
PC Suite Caution! If LG PC Suite is not activated automatically in your PC, please check your CD-ROM setting on PC. 3 Your phone and PC are now connected. Backing up and restoring your phone‘s information 1 Connect your phone to your PC as outlined above. 2 Click on the Backup icon, and select Backup or Restore. 3 Choose whether to back up Contents Data and/or Phonebook/Schedule/Todo/ Memo Data. Select the location you want to back up the information to, or restore it from. Click OK.
4 Click on File and select Save. You can now select where you want to save your contacts to. NOTE: To back up contacts saved to your SIM card, click on the SIM card folder on the left side of the PC screen. Right click on one of your contacts and choose Select all, then Copy or Move to phone memory. Right-click your contacts and select Copy to contact. Now click on the Handset folder on the left side of the screen and all your numbers will be displayed.
PC Suite 5 The PC will prompt you to launch your preferred music management software. 6 Select Windows Media Player. 7 Go to the Sync Tab, then drag and drop the music you wish to transfer to your handset into the Sync List pane. 8 Click on Start Sync button. This starts the transfer process. WARNING Do not disconnect your phone during the transfer. NOTE: Music Sync is only available for music contents.
NOTE: When using Bluetooth, you have to select iSync on in option menu. TIP! To install the iSync menu in Macintosh PC, please visit the website www.lgmobile.com and download the plug-in for iSync. DivX Converter Install the DivX converter, which is supplied on the same CD as the PC Sync software. DivX will convert media files on your PC to a format that lets you upload them and view them on your phone. Once installed select DivX from the Program Files on your PC, then DivX converter followed by Converter.
The web Browser Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world of games, music, news, sport, entertainment and loads more, straight to your mobile phone. Wherever you are and whatever you’re into. Accessing the web 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Browser on the Communication tab. 2 To go straight to the browser home page, select Home. Alternatively, select Enter address and type in the URL, followed by OK. NOTE: You will incur extra cost by connecting to these services and downloading content.
Using the RSS reader Accessing a saved page RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a family of web feed formats used to publish frequently updated content, such as blog entries, news headlines or podcasts. An RSS document, called a feed, web feed or channel, contains either a summary of content from an associated website or its full text. RSS makes it possible for people to keep up-to-date with their favourite web sites in an automated way that is easier than checking manually.
The web Changing web browser settings 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Connectivity on the Settings tab. 2 Select Browser settings. 3 You can edit the Profile, Appearance settings, Cache/ Cookies, Security or Reset settings. 4 You can simply set these on or off by touching the switch icon. Using your phone as a modem Your GC900 can be used as a modem for your PC, giving you email and internet access even when you don’t have any wired connection.
Using Bluetooth: 1 Ensure Bluetooth is switched On and Visible for both your PC and GC900. 2 Pair your PC and GC900 so that a passcode is required to connect them. 3 Use the Connection wizard on your LG PC Suite to create an active Bluetooth connection. 4 Click Inernetkit on your PC. Then click New. 5 Click Modem. 6 Choose Standard Modem over Bluetooth link and click OK. It will now appear on the screen. 7 Click Connect and your PC will connect via your GC900.
Settings This folder lets you adapt your settings to personalise your GC900. Changing your screen settings 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Screen settings on the Settings tab. 2 You can choose the option menu from: Wallpaper - Choose an image for homescreens, locking, switching the phone on or off, or making or receiving a call. NOTE: The setting will be reset if you select Reset menu. Homescreens - Widget/ Contact/ Multimedia/ Shortcut Lock screen - Choose the clock type on the lock screen.
3 You can then change all sounds and alert options available in the list, including your Voice/Video ringtone, Volume, Message alerts and others. Changing your phone settings Use the freedom of adapting the GC900 to your own preferences. 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Phone settings on the Settings tab. 2 Select a menu from the list below: Date & Time - Adjust your date and time settings or choose to auto update the time when travelling or for daylight saving.
Settings Changing your touch settings Changing your connectivity settings From the home screen select then scroll to Phone settings > Touch settings on Settings tab. Touch vibration - Change the vibration On/Off. Vibration type - Vibration 1/2/3 Vibration volume - Controls the strength of vibration. Touch sound - Change the tone when touching the screen. Sound - Sound 1/2/3 Volume - Controls the volume of tone.
GPS GPS technology uses information from earth-orbiting satellites to find locations. A receiver estimates the distance to GPS satellites based on the time it takes for signals to reach them, then uses that information to identify its location. This can take up to several minutes to find your location. Stand Alone GPS Receiver – The technology that communicates to the GPS Satellites to determine current location.
Settings There are two types of GPS Navigation Software: - Maps stored on Handset/ Memory Card where no Data connection is required. A third party may provide this solution. - Maps stored on Server where all mapping information is streamed to the handset over a data connection (charges may apply). This has the benefit of the maps being regularly updated and can contain other useful information such as petrol prices, parking and weather.
Using memory manager Your GC900 has three available memories: the phone itself, the SIM Card and an external memory card (which you may need to purchase separately). You can use memory manager to determine how each memory is used and see how much space is available. From the home screen select then scroll to Phone settings on the Settings tab. Select Memory info. Handset common memory 1/2 View the memory available on your GC900 for MMS, Email, Java applications and others.
Settings Using flight mode Turn flight mode on by selecting then Settings. Touch Profiles and select Flight mode. Flight mode prevents you making calls, connecting to the Internet, sending messages. Sending and receiving files using Bluetooth Bluetooth is a great way to send and receive files as it uses no wires and connection is quick and easy. You can also connect to a Bluetooth headset to make and receive calls.
3 You will see where the file has been saved and choose to View the file or Use as. Files will usually be saved to the appropriate folder in My stuff. Changing your Bluetooth settings 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Bluetooth on the Settings tab. 2 Touch . Make your changes to: My device information - Enter a name for your GC900. My device visibility - Choose to be Visible, Hidden or Visible for 1 min. Remote SIM mode on - Activate the remote SIM mode. iSync on - Choose to activate on iSync.
Settings 4 Choose the device you want to pair with and enter a passcode, then touch OK. 5 Your phone will then connect to the other device, on which you will need to enter the same passcode. 6 Your passcode-protected Bluetooth connection is now ready. Using a Bluetooth headset 1 Check that your Bluetooth is On. 2 Follow the instructions that came with your headset to put it in pairing mode and pair your devices. 3 The headset will be automatically switched to Headset profile.
Wi-Fi Wireless Manager allows you to manage Internet connections per Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) on your device. It allows the phone to connect to local wireless networks, or access the Internet wirelessly. Wi-Fi is faster and has a greater range than Bluetooth wireless technology and can be used for fast emailing and Internet browsing. NOTE: The GC900 supports WEP, WPA-PSK/2 encryption, and not EAP, WPS encryption.
Wi-Fi 2. Wi-Fi network profile support 1 Wi-Fi profile support (how to connect to a frequently-used AP or Hidden AP) 1) If the AP does not appear in the search list, you can connect to it by saving it as a profile. 2) Saving the frequently-used AP as a profile makes it easier to enter the Security key when connecting to an AP with that Security type. 3) If the AP does not support DHCP, you can connect to the AP using a static IP address.
3 How to save the Wi-Fi profile 1) Select Saved networks from the Options menu, then select New network and enter values into each field. 2) It is possible to select and save the AP search list by selecting Wi-Fi On and then Refresh (Searching AP). 3) After connecting to an AP with this Security type, the profile will be saved automatically. 3. How to obtain MACaddress For setting up a connection in some wireless networks with MAC filter you may need to enter the MAC address of your GC900 into the router.
Phone Software update LG Mobile Phone Software upgrade in web site For more information and using this function, Please visit LGmobile. com site path: http://www.lgmobile.com - select country – Products menu - Manual & software menu This Feature allows you to upgrade your software to the latest version and conveniently on the internet without needing to visit our service center.
Accessories There are a variety of accessories available for your mobile phone, which may be sold separately. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Consult your local dealer for availability. (Items described below may be optional.) Charger Battery Stereo headset Data cable and CD Connect and synchronise your GC900 and PC. User Guide Learn more about your GC900. GC900 User Guide NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories.
Network service Technical data The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on E-GSM 900, DCS 1800, GSM 850, PCS 1900 and W-CDMA networks. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider.
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GC900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GC900 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers. • The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture. • Use the accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily.
• Use a hands-free kit, if available. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Blasting area Children Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Potentially explosive atmospheres Emergency calls • Do not use the phone at a refueling point. • Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
• Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability. • Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom.
Trouble Shooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible Solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal weak Outside GSM network area Move towards a window or into an open area.
Message Possible causes Possible Solutions Battery totally empty Charge battery. Temperature out of range Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Contact problem Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary. No mains voltage Plug in to a different socket or check the voltage. Charger defective If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories.
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. ﻻ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ. ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻼﹰ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ SIM ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ GSM ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ .
• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ • ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ. • ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ. • ﻻ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭ .ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ .ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ. ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺘﹼﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ .
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻻﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ. • ﺗﻮ ﹼﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ RFﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﹰﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ، ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ • ﻻ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﻻ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ .ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﺒﺐ. ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹼ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ،ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ﹼ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ. • ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ، ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ) .(SARﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ GC900ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GC900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﺎﺀ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،E-GSM 900ﻭ ،DCS 1800ﻭGSM ،850ﻭ PCS 1900ﻭ.W-CDMA ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .
ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ،ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(. ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ) .ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﻭﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ .
ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ LG ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ .http://update.lgmobile.com ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ. ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .
(2ﺇﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺴﻬﹼ ﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ. (3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ،DHCPﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IPﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻲ. 2ﻭﺻﻒ ﻛﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ .WiFi (1ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ) SSID :ﻣﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ( (2ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ :ﺩﻋﻢ .WPA-PSK/2 ،WEP (3ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ :ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ.
WiFi ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ) WiFiﺷﺒﻜﺔ LAN ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﹰ WiFi .ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻭﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ،WEP ﻭﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ،WPA-PSK/2ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ،EAPﻭﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ .
ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ .ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ. 1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. 2ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﹰ 3ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 1ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ .ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ: ﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ. ﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺳﻬﻼﹰ .
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﹼ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ -ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ -ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ،Java ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ GC900ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ :ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺬﺍﺗﻪ ،ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( .
GPS ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ GPSﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ. ﻳﻘ ﹼﺪﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ GPSﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ. ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻀﻊ ﹴ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻟﺪﻯ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ GPSﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻣﺢ ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ. ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ - USBﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ GC900 ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ LG PC Suiteﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ . ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ - :ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ. ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ -ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ 1/2/3 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ . ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ -ﻳﺘﺼﻞ GC900ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ. ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﹴﺬ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﻭﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .GC900 ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ PINﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .GC900 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .30 ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ: ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰﺓ ﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ: ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ Google 1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .GC900 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ Google ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ Googleﻓﻲ Googleﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ GPSﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .GC900ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺳﺒﻴﻠﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
ﻭﻳﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ :USB ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ LG PC Suiteﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ. 2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ،USBﺛﻢ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .LG PC Suite 3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ /ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ RSS ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺇ ﹼﻥ (Really Simple Syndication) RSSﻋﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ،ﺷﺄﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ .ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،RSSﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ، ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ .ﻳﺴﻤﺢ RSSﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺘﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ.
ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻳﺼﻠﻚ ﺑﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ،ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ،ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ .ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ. ﻟﻜﻲ ﹼ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. 2ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ .
DivX Converter ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ DivX converterﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ .ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ DivX ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ. ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ DivXﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺛﻢ DivX converterﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﹼﻮﻝ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ .
PC Suite ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows Media Player ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. 3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ. 4ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﺳﻴﻘﺮﺃ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ :ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ... ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. 5ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. 6ﺣﺪﺩ .
ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 1ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. 1ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. 3ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 3ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 4ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ.
PC Suite ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ PC Suiteﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. 2ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ LG PC Suiteﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ LG PC Suiteﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. 3ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ. ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ 1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
PC Suite ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻝ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ PC Suiteﺍﳌﺰ ﹼﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ http://update.lgmobile. ) .comﻓﻲ www.lgmobile.com ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( 3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ.
ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ ﹼ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ. ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ .ﺍﺑﺪﺃ 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ .ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ 4ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﹺ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ. 5ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﹴﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ 3ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ) ،+ﺃﻭ – ،ﺃﻭ xﺃﻭ ÷( ،ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ =.
ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ ﹼ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﹼ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹼ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 1ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺠﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﻣﺴﺠﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ 5ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .
ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ. ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ. 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. 3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ.
ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ ﹼ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻠﺔ. ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻘﹼ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ،ﻭﺃﺿﻒ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ :ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ. 4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ .
ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ ﹼ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ .ﺍﳌﺲ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﺲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ،ﺃﻭ ﺫﻛﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﹺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻌﻢ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ،ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﹰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ FMﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . 3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ .
ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 2ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ . 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ LG GC900ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ FMﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ. 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 5ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 6ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ .ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒ ﹼﻴﻦ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﹼ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ LG ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﹼ GC900ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﹼ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ M-Toy ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ M-Toyﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ. ﹼ ﺗﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﺢ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ LG PC Suiteﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 87ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ. ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ SWFﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ 1ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ . 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: • ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 3ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ • ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ :ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻲ. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ. 4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .
ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ. ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ. 4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻛﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ،ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ. ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ . 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛـ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ: ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ -ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ -ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻚ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ،ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳊﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺍﳌﺲ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 2ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. 4ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ . 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺑﻠﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 2ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻴﺔ. 3ﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻲ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 3ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﱠ 4ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 5ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ . 2ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. 3ﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ. 6ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ .ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ < ﺩﻣﺞ 5ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ. ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ. ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ 00:00:40 : ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ 00:00:40 : ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ 00:01:20 : 6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ. ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. 7ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ MPEG4 ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ .(D1) 720x480 ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ . 2ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ /ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ. ﺩﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄ ﹶﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ . 2ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ . 1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ . 2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ،ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ،ﺷﻌﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻴﺎﺑﻪ. 2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ. ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ،ﺷﻌﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻴﺎﺑﻪ. 4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻧﺎ ﹰ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ . . 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺺ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻼﻡ. 2ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. 3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ. 3ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ . 4ﺣ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﻭﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺑﻊ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺑﻊ. ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺿﻔﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ. ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛـ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻛـ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ. ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺿﻔﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ .
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﻔﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛـ . 4ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ. 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ: ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ 2ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ.ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜ ﹼﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ LG GC900ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ 320x240ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 1ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ. ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ 2ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻀﻊ ﹴ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ .ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺎﺩﺓﹰ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ LG GC900ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ 720X480 ) .(D1ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺤﺐ .GC900 ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ 1ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ. ﻓﻲ 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ. 3ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ،ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ، ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ،ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺧﺮﻓﺔ.
ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ، ﹼ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ. ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻳﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ .ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴ ﹰﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗ ﹰﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﹰ. 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . 2ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ، ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ .
ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ -ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ .ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﳌﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﹰﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓ ﹰﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺮﺱﺍﻟﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ .YouTube ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ LG GC900ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ 720X480 ) .(D1ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 2ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ .ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 3ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﹰ 4ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ،ﺻ ﹼﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﹰﺓ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. Rec 6ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 7ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﹰ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ .
3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 4ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ. ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ 1ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ 1ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ. 3ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ :ﻭﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ،ﻭﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ،ﻭﺯﺧﺮﻓﺔ. 4ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ،ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﹴﺬ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﹰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ.
ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ -ﹼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ. ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ -ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ. ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ -ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ 2x2ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ .3x3 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ -ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ -ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ -ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ : ﻋﺎﺩﻱ -ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ، ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ. ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ -ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﺳﺒﻊ ﻃﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺟﺪﺍ. ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ -ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ .ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺘﺴﻢ. ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ -ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ .ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ 1ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ. 3ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ -ﻏ ﹼﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻳﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ .ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴ ﹰﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗ ﹰﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﹰ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ 1ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ. ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ -ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ . ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ. ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ -ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺮﺱﺍﻟﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﹼﻧﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. 46 | LG GC900ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 2ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺻ ﹼﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﺘﺒﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ. 4ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ: ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﹼ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﹺ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﻢ. ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900 ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ: ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ. ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ .ﺗﺠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 2ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900 ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ.
ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،GC900 ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ .ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ -ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ .ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ،ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ -ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﺭﹴ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. 3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ -ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ. ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ.
ﹶ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻓﻲ -ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ .(IMAP4ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ،POP3ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟـ ،POP3 ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ +ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟـ .IMAP4 ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ .ﻓﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ POP3ﺃﻭ IMAP4ﺗﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﹰﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄ ﹰﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠ ﹰﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻗﻢ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎﹰ ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ T9ﺗﻨﺒﺆﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ T9ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ، ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،T9ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ،ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ(. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . . ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ T9ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ: ﺃﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ. ﺛﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ،ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ .ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﺣﺪﺩ 2ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻚ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ ﹺ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﺍﳌﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ.
ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ. 2ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ. ﻧﺴﺦ -ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻌ ﹰﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
8ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ، ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ،ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻬﻨﺔ ،ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ،ﻭﻋﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ، ﻭﺫﻛﺮﻯ ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ. 9ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ. 3ﹺ 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ.
ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ: 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ .ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﹺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. 2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ .USIM ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻗﻢ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰﺓ ﻭ/ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ -ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ(. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻﹰ، ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ.
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ DTMF ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ DTMFﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺘﺔ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ DTMFﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ -ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ DTMFﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ )ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻤﺲ .DTMF ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﹶﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ. 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ. 3ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ .ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ. 4ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ -ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﻛﺘﻢ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ. ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ -ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ -ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ. 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃ ﹼﻭﻝ 2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﹺ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﺃﺣﺮﻑ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ . ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ 2ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺟﻴﻜﺘﻮﺭ/ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ Push ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ - ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ 1-10 ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ 23
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍ ﹰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔ ﹰﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺄﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﹰ. ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ. ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ،ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ،ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ. ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ. ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ،ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ.
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺳﻬﻼﹰ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﹼ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﹺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ .
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 3ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ 4ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ • ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ - ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ،ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ،ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴﹺ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ .
ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ .ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ :ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺻﻼﹰ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓﹰ ،ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ: 1ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ. ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺇﻥ GC900ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 32ﻏﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﹺ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﲢﺬﻳﺮ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ،ﻭﺇﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ. 2ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻧﺤﻮﻙ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒ ﹼﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ،ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ. 3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ. ﹼ 4ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ.
ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 4ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ.
ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 1ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﲢﺬﻳﺮ :ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 3ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM 2ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﹺ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،SIMﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ.
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ .ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻘﻔﻠ ﹰﺔ.
ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ،ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻛﻴﺒﻞ (USB ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ :ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ،USBﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ :ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. • ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ :ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ. • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ :ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ. ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ • ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﲢﺬﻳﺮ :ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ .ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ. ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﲢﺬﻳﺮ :ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻠﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ .ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ .LCDﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ88................ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ 89.................................................... ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ89.................................................... ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ89.................................................... ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows Media 90....................................................... Player ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 90..........................................iSync 91.....................................
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 71.......................................................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 72.................................................... ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ72......................................................... ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ73........................................... ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ73.............................................. ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻟﻢ 73........................................................ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ73....................................
ﻛﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﻋﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ 45..................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ 45.......................................... ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ46........................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ47................................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ48................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ48......................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ49......................................
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ 8................................. ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ10............................... ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ11................................ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ13........................................................... ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ14........................................................... ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ16......................................................... ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ17..............
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ 01 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ 02 ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ 03 ﻛﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﻋﺎ ﹰ 04 ﻛﻦ ﻣﻨﻈ ﹰﻤﺎ 05 ﻭﻳﺐ 06 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 07 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ 08
ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ GC900ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ،LG ﹼ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ.
ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
